User manual - XWP1_1B

ManualsBrandsCasio ManualsMusical InstrumentXW-P1

MA1112-A Printed in China

XWP1-AR-1A

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

.ﻞﺒﻘﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻲﻓ ﻊﺟﺮﻤﻛ ﺕﺎﻣﻮﻠﻌﻤﻟﺍ ﻊﻴﻤﺟ ﻰﻠﻋ ﻆﻓﺎﺣ ﻚﻠﻀﻓ ﻦﻣ

ﻥﺎﻣﻷﺍ ﺕﺎﻃﺎﻴﺘﺣﺇ

ﺕﺎﻃﺎﻴﺘﺣﺇ” ﻞﺼﻔﻨﻤﻟﺍ ﺀﺰﺠﻟﺍ ﺓﺀﺍﺮﻗ ﻦﻣ ﺪﻛﺄﺗ ،ﺔﻴﻤﻗﺮﻟﺍ ﺔﻟﻵﺍ ﻡﺍﺪﺨﺘﺳﺇ ﺔﻟﻭﺎﺤﻣ ﻞﺒﻗ

.“ﻥﺎﻣﻷﺍ

.ﺎﻴﻧﺎﻤﻟﺃ ﻰﻓ ﺔﻴﺌﻴﺒﻟﺍ ﺔﻳﺎﻤﺤﻟﺍ ﻦﻣ ﺪﻛﺄﺘﻟﺍ ﻥﻮﻧﺎﻗ ﻰﻟﺇ ﺮﻴﺸﺗ ﺔﻳﺮﺋﺍﺪﻟﺍ ﺔﻣﻼﻌﻟﺍ ﻩﺬﻫ

XWP1_ar.indb 1XWP1_ar.indb 1 12/20/2011 1:28:14 PM12/20/2011 1:28:14 PM

Summary of content (95 pages)

PAGE 1
‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪XW-P1‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪MA1112-A Printed in China‬‬ ‫‪XWP1-AR-1A‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻓﻀﻠﻚ ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ”ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪K‬‬ ‫‪XWP1-AR-1A‬‬ ‫‪12/20/2011 1:28:14 PM‬‬ ‫‪XWP1_ar.
PAGE 2
‫● ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﺰﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻭ ﻛﻠﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻨﻌ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﺗ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻱ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ‪ CASIO‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋ ﹰﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‪.
PAGE 3
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪AR-5 .........................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪AR-35 ............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻫﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺰﻑ‪AR-8 ................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻼﺕ )ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺧﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻴﻦ( ‪AR-35 .......................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪AR-8...................................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ‪AR-9..................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‪AR-9.............................................
PAGE 4
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪AR-49 .....................‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ‪AR-67 ........................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪AR-51 ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﻲ ﻟﻠﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﻭﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪AR-67 ..............‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪AR-49 ...............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ – ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ‪AR-51 .............................‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪AR-52 .........................
PAGE 5
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪AR-79 ..........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻲ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪AR-79 ......................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ‪AR-79 .................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪AR-80 ..............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ ‪AR-81 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ‪AR-81 ...............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪AR-82 ..................................
PAGE 6
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ( ﻭﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺾ‪ ،‬ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ )‪ ،‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻗﻠﻴ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻼ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺬ ﺣﺬﺭﻙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺿﻌﺖ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻗﻔﺪ ﺗﻨﺰﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻛﻮﺍﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ(‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻬﺪ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﻬﻞ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.
PAGE 7
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ‬ ‫‪bo‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ(‬ ‫‪bn‬‬ ‫‪bm‬‬ ‫‪bl‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪LCD‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪bk .‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [POWER‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ]‪ [VOLUME‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-9‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪ .
PAGE 8
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪bp‬‬ ‫‪bq‬‬ ‫‪br‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-20‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ )–( ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺒﺔ )‪ (+‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-21‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ‪ .
PAGE 9
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻫﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺰﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫• ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻻﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺷﻴﺌ ﹰﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﹰﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.
PAGE 10
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻫﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺰﻑ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﺍﻝ ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-65‬‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬ ‫)‪(2‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫)‪(3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬ ‫)‪(4‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫)‪(5‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ‬ ‫)‪(6‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫*‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳ ﹰﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.
PAGE 11
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻫﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺰﻑ‬ ‫■ ﺗﺒﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻀﻲﺀ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪POWER‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻈﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪POWER‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﺩﺍﻓﺌ ﹰﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺷﻲﺀ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻻﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ‪ ،‬ﺧﺬ ﺣﺬﺭﻙ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 12
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ )ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﺘﺪﺋﻴﻦ(‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻟﻸﻧﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺩﻋﻨﺎ ﻧﺒﺪﺃ!‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ POWER‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬ ‫■ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪.
PAGE 13
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ )ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﺘﺪﺋﻴﻦ(‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ‪ ،‬ﺩﻋﻨﺎ ﻧﺮ￯ ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻀﻴﺌ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪SOLO SYNTH‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 10‬ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ”ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ“‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻉ ‪ 10‬ﺑﻨﻮﻙ ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ ﻣﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،9‬ﻣﻊ‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﻧﻐﻤﻠﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﻚ ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻛﻠﻲ ‪ 100‬ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﻚ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﻨﻚ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 14
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ )ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﺘﺪﺋﻴﻦ(‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺰﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻓﻌﻠﻚ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺗﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭ )‪ (U‬ﻭﻳﻤﻴﻦ )‪ (I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ )ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﺘﺪﺋﻴﻦ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺄﻧﻚ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺗﻘﻨﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻻﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻫﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻳﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﻭﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺧﺬ ﻭﻗﺘﻚ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻢ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﻮﻻﺀ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﹰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯‪-‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺤﺖ ”ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ“‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-18‬‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻳﻔﻌﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ .
PAGE 16
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ )ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﺘﺪﺋﻴﻦ(‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﺩﻋﻨﺎ ﻧﺒﺪﺃ ﺷﺮﺣﻨﺎ ﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺑﺎﻹﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ STEP SEQ‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (16‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 16‬ﺟﺰﺀ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻘﺪﺓ ﺟﺪ ﹰﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ‪ 11‬ﻭ ‪ 14‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ )ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﺘﺪﺋﻴﻦ(‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ ﹰﺍ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻚ ﺷﺎﻫﺪﺕ ﻛﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻭﻋﺰﻓﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻧﻮﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺀ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻋﻰ ”ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ“‪ .
PAGE 18
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ )ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﺘﺪﺋﻴﻦ(‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ،2‬ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻄﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪  SETTING‬ﻭ ‪ WRITE‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.
PAGE 19
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪bm bn bo‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪bp‬‬ ‫‪bq‬‬ ‫‪br‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪bl‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ‪ 16‬ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻸﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-11‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪4‬‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪4‬‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬ ‫)‪ MIDI‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪(4‬‬ ‫)‪ MIDI‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪(3‬‬ ‫)‪ MIDI‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪(2‬‬ ‫)‪ MIDI‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪(1‬‬ ‫‪AR-19‬‬ ‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:14 PM‬‬ ‫‪XWP1_ar.
PAGE 21
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TONE‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻀﺊ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ SOLO SYNTH‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ VARIOUS‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ PRESET/USER‬‬ ‫ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ NUM/BANK‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻲﺀ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻀﻴﺌ ﹰﺎ‪.
PAGE 22
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ EDIT‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺃﻭﻝ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺳﻮﻟﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 23
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻗﻮﺍﻟﺐ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (1‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ ،(6‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻌﻠﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻗﻀﺎﺀ ﻗﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺣﺴﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﻼﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ‪.
PAGE 24
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫)‪ (1‬ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ‪OSC1‬‬ ‫”‪ “OSC‬ﻫﻲ ﺃﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ”‪) “oscillator‬ﺍﻟﻤﺬﺑﺬﺏ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻌﻠﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﻟﺒﻴﻦ ‪ OSC‬ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﺨﻠﻘﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺃﺳﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺸﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣ ﹰﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ‪ :OSC‬ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﻱ ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺮﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.
PAGE 25
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫■ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﻟﺐ ﻣﻦ )‪ (1‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪(6‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫( ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-35‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻌﺔ )‪ (‬ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺾ )‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-21‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ”‪ “OSC Block >Ent‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪  PART‬ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.
PAGE 26
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻏﻼﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ )‪ .(envelope‬ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ( ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻔﺎﺕ ‪ ،PCM OSC ،OSC‬ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﻏﻼﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯(‪.
PAGE 27
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫‪) Sync OSC‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪ (2‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ )‪ .(Sync OSC‬ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪ (2‬ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪ ،(1‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﺒﺤﻮﺍ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪On ،Off‬‬ ‫‪) OriginalKey‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪ (5‬ﻓﻘﻂ( )‪(V‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ )‪ .(original key‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪ (5‬ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫‪Envelope >Ent‬‬ ‫ﻏﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ )‪ .(envelope‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ( ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻏﻼﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ“‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯( ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﻌﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،127‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻏﻼﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‪.
PAGE 29
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫■ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪ LFO1 :(8‬ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪ :(9‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪LFO2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻟﻠﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ“ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-21‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ”‪ “LFO >Ent‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪  PART‬ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫■ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪ :(10‬ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ﺗﺤﻜﻤﺎﺕ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ( ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ )ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-21‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ”‪ “VirtualCtrl >Ent‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،8‬ﻭﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ‪‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 31
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺪﺍﺳﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﺲ( ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﺲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ ،(6‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻌﺔ ) ( ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺾ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ) ( ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 32
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫■ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪(6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-21‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬‬ ‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ )‪ .(detune‬ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 6‬ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻗﻠﻴ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ‪ .
PAGE 33
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ ﻭﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻌﺔ ﺯﻭﺍﻟﻖ ) (‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ) (‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺾ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ) ( ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 34
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ ‪ PCM‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ‪ PCM‬ﻏﻴﺮ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ(‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ ‪ PCM‬ﻭﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ‪ PCM‬ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ‪ PCM‬ﻟﻠﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻟﻬﻢ‪.
PAGE 35
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ‪ PCM‬ﻟﻠﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ‪ PCM‬ﻭﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬ ‫■ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ‪ PCM‬ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺧﺐ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﺤﻈﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-40‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-44‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 37
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌ ﹰﺎ )ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪HOLD‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-40‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-44‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻤﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻌﺔ ﺯﻭﺍﻟﻖ ) ( ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﺗﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻨﻊ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﺒﺴﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪.
PAGE 38
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺑﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪) (+‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪OCTAVE‬‬ ‫(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪TRANSPOSE‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻹﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻹﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ )ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ –3‬ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ +3‬ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ(‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ EFFECT‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻤﺎﺕ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫■ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫‪Rev Type‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ )‪ .(reverb type‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬ ‫‪Type2 ،Type1‬‬ ‫‪Rev Level‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ )‪ .(reverb level‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟـ ‪ DSP‬ﺗﻨﻘﺴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 53‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ‪ DSP‬ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪ DSP .‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪ 0-0‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ 0-1‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻀﺎﻏﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ‪ :DSP‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ‪ ،DSP‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻋﻪ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻋﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ‪ ،DSP‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ “DSP‬ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-87‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ DSP‬ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 41
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫‪bo‬‬ ‫‪bm‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪bq‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪bk‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺘﻤ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻼ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ‪ 100‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ .
PAGE 42
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﺧﻄﻮﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﻮﺍﻣﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 16‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ : TYPE‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺰﻭﻓﺔ )‪ (L1‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺰﻭﻓﺔ )‪ .
PAGE 43
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬ ‫‪Step Edit >Ent‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺰﻭﻓﺔ‬ ‫)ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪.
PAGE 44
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ‪) Step Edit‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-42‬ﻭﺧﻠﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ARPEGGIO‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪bn‬‬ ‫‪bp‬‬ ‫‪bq‬‬ ‫‪bk‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻈﻴﻢ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻔﺘﻖ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺫﻫﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻤﺘﻠﻚ ‪ 100‬ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻖ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 100‬ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﻢ‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ :‬ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪ TEMPO‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫■ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪TEMPO‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ – ‪)  TEMPO‬ﺃﺑﻄﺄ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ TEMPO +‬‬ ‫)ﺃﺳﺮﻉ(‪.
PAGE 47
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻓﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺠﻠﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 1,600‬ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ‪،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ REC‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 48
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-45‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ )ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫■ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ REC‬‬ ‫‪. PLAY/STOP‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ‪. REC‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻛﺤﻠﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻻﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﻜﻨ ﹰﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪REC‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫‪bo‬‬ ‫‪bm‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪bp‬‬ ‫‪bq‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪bl‬‬ ‫‪bk‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 16‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﺠﺮﺩ ﻣﺎﻛﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻤﻜﻨ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﻠﻖ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻛﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻳﻤﺘﻠﻚ ‪ 100‬ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ .
PAGE 51
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-67‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-53‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-52‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪8ch‬‬ ‫‪9ch‬‬ ‫‪10ch‬‬ ‫‪11ch‬‬ ‫‪12ch‬‬ ‫‪13ch‬‬ ‫‪14ch‬‬ ‫‪15ch‬‬ ‫‪16ch‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪8‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-49‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-49‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ
PAGE 52
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺇﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻭﺑﻨﻚ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ )ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 53
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪ STEP SEQUENCER‬‬ ‫ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺗﺔﺍﻻﺧﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫■ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16‬ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16‬ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ NOTE‬ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺧﻄﻮﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫■ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪FUNC A/B‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻲﺀ‪(NOTE) L :‬‬ ‫‪FUNC A/B‬‬ ‫ﻣﻀﻲﺀ‪(VELOCITY) M :‬‬ ‫‪FUNC A/B‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪PART‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ )‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (B‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪FUNC A/B‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 55
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﺤﻨﺎﺀ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺰﻓﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻧﺤﻨﺎﺀ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻭ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻧﺤﻨﺎﺀ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ EDIT‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 56
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ ‪ “1‬ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-54‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬ ‫)‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“Pattern Change Timing‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ(‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪  STEP SEQUENCER‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ EDIT‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪EDIT‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ MIXER‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 57
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫■ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪3‬‬ ‫‪Trk On/Off >Ent‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ )‪(track on/off‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪  EDIT‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪.Trk On/Off >Ent‬‬ ‫‪Pattern‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪8‬‬ ‫‪Part‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Drm‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Bass ،5‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Sol1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪،Chrd ،2‬‬ ‫‪ Ctl‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪4‬‬ ‫‪Track‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‪.
PAGE 58
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪3‬‬ ‫‪Track Param >Ent‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Max Step‬‬ ‫‪Beat Info‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪16‬‬ ‫‪Step Size‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪،6 ،2‬‬ ‫‪NoteLngth‬‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ .
PAGE 59
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪3‬‬ ‫‪Copy >Ent‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ )‪ (TMP‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 60
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ )‪ (U, q, w, I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫] [ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪PATTERN‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪PART‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪STEP‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫■ ‪ :Note Shift‬ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ )‪ (U, q, w, I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻻﻗﻮﺍﺱ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻭﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ )‪ (U, q, w, I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.
PAGE 62
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ CHAIN‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ‬ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.CHAIN‬‬ ‫)‪ (+‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ‪ SMF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ CHAIN‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ‬ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬ ‫‪7 8‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪bq‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﻛﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ )ﻳﺪﻋﻰ ”ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ“( ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺪﻋﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ‪ 100‬ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻛﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ 100‬ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .
PAGE 64
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ PERFORM‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﻚ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺩﺍﺀ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻛﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺧﺘﺮﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺪﻋﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﻌﺪ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ( ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺪﻋﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 65
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫‪Zone Parame >Ent‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(4‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪  PART‬ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-62‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ . EDIT‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬ ‫‪Arp Enable‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ‪/‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-40‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪On ،Off‬‬ ‫‪Phrase Enable‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ‪/‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-44‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪On ،Off‬‬ ‫‪Controller >Ent‬‬ ‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ‪ .1‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ‪ .
PAGE 67
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬ ‫‪ArpKeyRgHi‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﺐ ﻣﺪ￯ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ C-1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪G9‬‬ ‫‪Arp Hold‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ‪/‬ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 68
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫‪bo‬‬ ‫‪bm‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪bq‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪bk‬‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻠﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻻﺧﺮ￯*‬ ‫ﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ )ﺍﻻﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،16‬ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-18‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﺗﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ”ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ“‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ”ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ MIXER‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 69
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻟﻖ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ )‪ (U, q, w, I‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﻟﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻀﻲﺀ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻲﺀ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ(‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ )ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺗﺔ(‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺸﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )ﺗﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ(‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-10‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ SETTING‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻧﻐﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺑﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ 0.1‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 415.5‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ 465.
PAGE 71
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ‪MIDI‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ SETTING‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ”‪ “MIDI >Ent‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪. ENTER‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ )‪ (U, q, w, I‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ‬ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪Sync Mode‬‬ ‫)‪ (+‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫‪Device ID‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫‪Basic Ch‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ )‪ .(basic channel‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﺔ ﻟـ ”‪،“Perform NRPN‬‬ ‫”‪ ،“S.
PAGE 72
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺨﻠﻴﻘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪،(AR-75‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﺤﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻟﺤﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ‪) SMF‬ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MIDI‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪  SETTING‬ﻭ ‪ WRITE‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺤﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ .
PAGE 74
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪bm‬‬ ‫‪bo‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪bq‬‬ ‫‪bk‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ (MIDI‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ‪ SDHC :‬ﺃﻭ ‪SD‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ‪ 32 :‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺮﻭﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭ ‪ SDHC‬ﻫﻮ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟـ ‪.
PAGE 75
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺮﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ −‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﻛﻞ‪.
PAGE 76
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻻﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺠﺮﻯ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ”ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻜﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.
PAGE 77
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‪:‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. SETTING‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “CardUtility‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪. ENTER‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “SettingData‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪. ENTER‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ .
PAGE 78
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“Save‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪) “Card Load‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ “Load‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ( ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ENTER‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.
PAGE 79
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. SETTING‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “CardUtility‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.CARD UTIL‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “Delete‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ENTER‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.
PAGE 80
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ MIDI‬ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺰﻭﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ MIDI‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.
PAGE 81
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻬﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﻮﻻﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 82
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫‪Format‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﻳﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-75‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ‪.SDXC‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﺕ ‪ SDXC‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﺃﻭ ‪.SDHC‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 32‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﺎ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ 32‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.
PAGE 83
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫‪File Name‬‬ ‫‪Invalid Tone‬‬ ‫‪Battery Low‬‬ ‫!‪Write Error‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻧﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻚ ﺃﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪ ،‬ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻜﻴﺲ )ﺍﻟﺴﺪﺍﺳﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﻏﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ ﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﻣﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪.(ZONE1) PART1‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺳﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪ ،‬ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻜﻴﺲ )ﺍﻟﺴﺪﺍﺳﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺀ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 84
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻠﻴ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻻﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻻﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻵﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻵﺕ ﺍﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺷﻮﺷﺮﺓ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺃﻗﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﺠﺎﺀﺓ‪.
PAGE 85
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻫﻴﻜﺲ )ﺍﻟﺴﺪﺍﺳﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ ‪PCM‬‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ‪PCM‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪DSP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮ￯‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ‬
PAGE 86
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻮﺍﺭﺝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪MIDI IN/OUT‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪L/MONO ،Line Out R‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪AC‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪B‬‬ ‫‪OUT ،IN‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ )ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻨﻴﻮﺗﻮ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﺀ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ(‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ × ‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪ 2.3 :‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺃﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪ 1.
PAGE 87
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻭﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫■ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺟﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺟﺪ ﹰﺍ‬ ‫• ﻗﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪ ،TV‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻟﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻼﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 88
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ DSP ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ DSP ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬DSP ‫■ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻫﻮ ﺃﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﻣﻦ‬،‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ‬DSP ‫ ﻧﻮﻉ‬.‫ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ‬DSP ‫ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬46 ‫ ﺇﻟﻰ‬15 ‫ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ‬،‫ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ‬DSP ‫ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬14 ‫ ﺇﻟﻰ‬01 ‫• ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ‬ .‫ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﻳﻦ‬DSP ‫ﻧﻮﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫“ ﻳﺘﺼﻼﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻂ‬Wah-Compressor” ‫ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻰ‬15 ‫ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬،‫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‬.‫ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﻢ‬،‫ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﻳﻦ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﻴﻦ‬DSP ‫ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺳﻤﻴﻦ‬DSP ‫• ﺃﺳﻢ‬ .
PAGE 89
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪DSP‬‬ ‫■ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻨﻮﻉ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫• )ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪ (A‬ﻭ )ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪ (B‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻫﻴﻜﺲ )ﺍﻟﺴﺪﺍﺳﻴﺔ( ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Enhancer :04‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ 8/16‬ﻭ ‪MASTER‬‬ ‫‪Wah :01‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ”‪ “wah‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ‪.LFO‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫‪) Resonance : ١‬ﺍﻟﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ( )ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(B‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ‪.
PAGE 90
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫‪Flanger :08‬‬ ‫‪Reflection :11‬‬ ‫ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻰ ﻟﻸﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪ LFO‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫‪) LFO Rate : ١‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪) (LFO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(A‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪.LFO‬‬ ‫‪) LFO Depth : ٢‬ﻋﻤﻖ ‪) (LFO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(B‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻖ ‪.LFO‬‬ ‫‪) LFO Waveform : ٣‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪) (LFO‬ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪.LFO‬‬ ‫‪) Feedback : ٤‬ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻴﺔ( )ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(127‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 91
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫‪Lo-Fi :14‬‬ ‫ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪Lo-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺭﺗﺠﺎﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻓﻴﻒ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻮﺝ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ FM‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺷﻮﺷﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﺥ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫‪) Wow and Flutter Rate : ١‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻓﻴﻒ(‬ ‫)ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(127‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻓﻴﻒ‪.
PAGE 92
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫‪Chorus :04‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪) LFO Waveform : ١‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪) (LFO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﻲ(‬ ‫‪) LFO Rate : ٢‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪) (LFO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(A‬‬ ‫‪) LFO Depth : ٣‬ﻋﻤﻖ ‪) (LFO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(B‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪Delay :05‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪) Delay Time : ١‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ( )ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(A‬‬ ‫‪) Feedback : ٢‬ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻴﺔ( )ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(127‬‬ ‫‪) Damp : ٣‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻤﻴﺪ( )ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(3‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻤﻴ
PAGE 93
Model: XW-P1 1 - 16 1 - 16 Transmitted 1 - 16 1 - 16 Recognized MIDI Implementation Chart Default Changed Mode 3 X Function Basic Channel Mode 3 X Version : 1.
PAGE 94
66 67 70 - 90 91 93 98, 99 100, 101 O *3 O *3 O *2 O O O *2 O *2 O O O *2 O O O *2 O *2 O *2 O 0 - 127 O *2 X X X O X X X X X :True # : Song Pos : Song Sel : Tune O O Program Change System Common : Clock : Commands System Exclusive System Real Time O O O O O X Aux X O X O X X Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO Sostenuto Soft pedal Reverb send Chorus send NRPN LSB, MSB RPN LSB, MSB O : Yes X : No .‫ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‬:*1 .http://world.casio.
PAGE 95
‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪XW-P1‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪MA1112-A Printed in China‬‬ ‫‪XWP1-AR-1A‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻓﻀﻠﻚ ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ”ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪K‬‬ ‫‪XWP1-AR-1A‬‬ ‫‪12/20/2011 1:28:14 PM‬‬ ‫‪XWP1_ar.